1. SAT’s Information Evening
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).
Tuesday 15th January 2019

2. English Maths Access arrangements Resources
SATs overview including reporting of KS2 test outcomes
English
Maths
Access arrangements
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).
Resources

3. Who’s Who? Miss Trevett Mr Frost Mr Ballance Mrs Goodlad Mrs Hughes
(Deputy Headteacher / Assessment Lead)
Mr Ballance
(Assistant Headteacher / Maths Lead)
Mrs Goodlad
(Inclusion Lead)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).
Miss Trevett
(English Lead / Year Six Teacher)
Mrs Hughes
(Year Six Leader)

4. Overview of the tests Why we test at KS2:
To assess children’s knowledge and understanding of specific elements of the KS2 national curriculum;
To provide a snapshot of a child’s attainment at end of KS2, which is compared to his/her attainment at KS1.
Tests designed to include material for all ability levels, including the more able.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

5. Who sits the tests
All children who are working at/above the ‘expected standard’ of the national curriculum;
There will be some children working below the ‘expected standard’. However, any child who can access any part of the test is required to sit these.
Therefore, disapplication from a test is unlikely under the new government arrangements.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

6. The tests
English grammar, punctuation (short answer questions) and spelling test; English reading (1 test);
Maths (3 papers: 1 arithmetic and 2 reasoning tests);
Writing is teacher assessed.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

7. Intervention support
All children receiving 6 English and Maths lessons per week until SATs
Mixed ability teaching allows for generation of more writing tasks
Reading sessions built into the curriculum
Continuation of ‘flexi-hour’ when children work on the area that most needs a boost
Pupil feedback / target setting;
Additional booster lessons during the school day / before or after school;
Teacher / pupil conferencing
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

8. Test outcomes – scaled scores
Based on raw score which is then converted into a scaled score (Max 120/ Min 80)
A scaled score of 100 is the government’s ‘expected standard’ whilst one of 110+ is the point at which a child is described as ‘working at a higher standard’
Published results - Information provided will include:
Raw score
Scaled score
Whether the expected standard has been attained
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

9. What the final test data report might look like
Writing
Reading
GRAMMAR PUNCTUATION AND SPELLING
Mathematics
RAW SCORE
No test 35 47 59
SCALED SCORE NA
111
101 99
STANDARD
AS (attained standard) AS
(attained standard) NS
(has not attained standard)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

10. Teacher Assessment Writing (only now)
GDS - working at a greater depth within the expected standard
EXS - working at the expected standard
WTS - working towards the expected standard
PKG - Pre-key stage growing development of the expected standard
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

11. Last year’s results 84.4% (78%) 90.6% (75%) 84.4% (76%) 89.4% (78%)
Writing (based on teacher assessments as there is currently no national test for writing)
Reading (based on test outcome)
GRAMMAR PUNCTUATION AND SPELLING
Mathematics (based on test outcome)
% children achieving expected standard
84.4% (78%)
90.6% (75%)
84.4% (76%)
89.4% (78%)
% achieving high level of attainment
38.3% (20%)
46.7% (28%)
42.8% (24%)
43.3% (34%)
Average scaled score
N/A
108.9 (105)
108.4 (104)
108.1 (106)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

12. What happens with the test results?
Used to inform our own teacher assessments in English and Maths;
Secondary schools may use results for streaming pupils or
Combination of SATs results, teacher assessment judgements and their own baseline testing.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

13. May 13th – 17th 2019 SATs week (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

14. English grammar, punctuation and spelling test
SATs week (2018 timetable)
DAY AM PM
MONDAY 13th May
English grammar, punctuation and spelling test
TUESDAY 14th May
English reading test
WEDNESDAY 15th May
Mathematics test
(Papers 1 & 2)
THURSDAY 16th May
(Paper 3)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

15. Spelling, Punctuation And Grammar – test
English
Spelling, Punctuation And Grammar – test
Reading – test
Writing – Teacher assessed
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

16. Reading
An hour to read the booklet – three texts – and answer the questions.
Usually 3 different text types e.g. narrative, poem, information text, letter…
Texts will get harder in terms of length and content.
50 marks on offer
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

17. Reading Comprehension Variety of skills tested:
Explaining meaning of words in context
Retrieving and recording key info
Summarising main ideas
Making and justifying inferences
Prediction
Explaining how material is related
Identifying and explaining how meaning is enhanced through word choice (authorial intent)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

18. Reading How you can help:
Support children at home – CGP books and test papers.
Read and discuss a variety of texts. Get children used to skills of skimming, scanning and reading for specific information.
If possible, share poetry with the children
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

19. SPAG – paper 1
45 minutes to answer 50 questions: short answer, multiple choice and circle/underline type questions
Covers many aspects of grammar and punctuation…
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

20. SPAG – paper 1 (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

21. SPAG – paper 1 (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

22. SPAG – paper 1 (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

23. SPAG – paper 1 (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

24. SPAG – paper 1 (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

25. SPAG – paper 1 were (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

26. SPAG 1
How you can help:
Support children at home – CGP books, other specifically designed SPAG work books (ask bookshop or search on Amazon) and online material e.g. KS2 Bitesize, topmarks, teachwire.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

27. SPAG – paper 2
SPELLING:
20 words to put into the context of a sentence
Administered by the teacher
Can cover words from Y3/4 and 5/6 word lists.
Will assess spelling rules e.g. communicate – communication.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

28. SPAG – paper 2 SUPERSTAR SPELLER STRATEGY… Listen to the word
Start with the easy parts…
Use a sound mat to help with the difficult parts
Say the word
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).
Segment
__ ___ ____
Put the word back together again

29. SPAG – paper 2 SPELLING: Whiteboards at the ready…
Please help yourself to a copy of the Y5/Y6 spelling list
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

30. SPAG – paper 2 How you can help:
Support children by testing them on their weekly spellings
Talk through the spelling rule
Break down the word – root word, prefix, suffix…
Encourage children to proof-read their writing, identify when a word is spelt incorrectly, and look it up in a dictionary
Display key spellings round the house
Develop ways of remembering commonly misspelt words: mnemonics, ‘spells-speak’, pictures, rhymes etc.
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

31. Writing – 27th June Teacher assessed using STA framework
Frequent moderation to inform and ensure quality of judgements
Pupils encouraged to write as frequently as possible in English but also Discovery lessons - a range of text types and styles
Engaging and interesting English curriculum based around quality texts… hopefully enjoyable!
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

32. Writing How you can help:
Encourage children to check and edit written work – use dictionary, thesaurus, read aloud to identify punctuation or grammar errors.
Exploit any opportunities to write for pleasure
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

33. 3 tests Arithmetic (40 marks) Reasoning 1 (35marks)
Maths
3 tests
Arithmetic (40 marks)
Reasoning 1 (35marks)
Reasoning 2 (35marks)
No longer a mental maths test
No calculators allowed
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

34. Maths Challenge No longer a level 6 paper
Harder reasoning tests instead
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

35. Maths What’s in? Long division 4 operations with fractions
Calculate decimal equivalent of fractions
Understand & use order of operations
Plot points in all 4 quadrants
Roman Numerals
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

36. Maths What’s in? (continued) Convert between miles and kilometres
Name parts of circle
Use formulae for area/volume of shapes
Calculate area of triangles & parallelograms
Calculate volume of 3-d shapes
Use letters to represent unknowns (algebra)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

37. Maths What’s out? Rotation Probability Median/Mode/Range (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

38. Maths Preparation 7 teachers Extra session for all since start of year
Tracking children’s progress and offering help accordingly through booster lessons
Focusing on arithmetic and fractions
Regular insight into test questions and regular arithmetic tests to avoid errors like these…..
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

39. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

40. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

41. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

42. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

43. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

44. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

45. Maths Some sample questions (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

46. Two of these diagrams are nets for a triangular prism.
Example SAT question
Two of these diagrams are nets for a triangular prism.
Put a tick in them.
1 mark

48. Debbie has a pack of cards numbered from 1 to 20
She picks four different number cards.
Exactly three of the four numbers are multiples of 5
Exactly three of the four numbers are even numbers.
All four of the numbers add up to less than 40
Write what the numbers could be.

49. David and his friends prepare a picnic.
Each person at the picnic will get:
3 sandwiches
2 bananas
1 packet of crisps
The children pack 45 sandwiches.
How many bananas do they pack?

50. A new phenomenon in maths tests: a 3 pointer!!!!

51. How can you help at home? 4 key things to work on tables fractions
problem solving
4 operations
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

52. Maths
26 rem 16
- 72
x 36 = 36
x 36 = 72 16
5 x 36 = 180
6 x 36 = 216
10 x 36 = 360
467
X 36
2802
4 4
14010
2 2
16812
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

53. Maths
Revision
Use the CGP books, looking at areas where they scored badly
BBC Bitesize Key Stage 2
Lunchtime workshops
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

54. Extra time Readers Access arrangements (Advanced)
Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures
(Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).

55. Rounded corner rectangle tabs with inset pictures (Advanced)
In the Transparency box, enter 65%.
Drag the picture onto the left side of the rectangle.
To reproduce the top rectangle (olive-green, “label one”) with text effects on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then click Align Middle.
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
To reproduce the other shapes on this slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL and select the picture and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process until there is a total of four groups of shapes.
Drag the groups so that they are distributed vertically on the slide. Press and hold CTRL and select all four groups. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 0.92”.
Point to Align, and then click Distribute Vertically.
Point to Align, and then click Align Center.
In the Shape Width box, enter 4.5”.
Click Ungroup.
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
To change the color and text for the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
In the Angle box, enter 90.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.
Select the rectangle that you would like to recolor.
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 32%.
In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
For the second rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 60% (third row, tenth option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% (third row, seventh option from the left).
In the Position box, enter 100%.
For the third rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 60% (third row, ninth option from the left).
For the fourth rectangle from the top, under Gradient stops, select Stop 2 from the drop-down list, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 60% (third row, fifth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the right pane, and then do the following:
To change the text on the duplicate rectangles, click in each text box and edit the text.
To change the picture on the duplicate rectangles (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to change.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, change the height of the picture to .75” if necessary.
Also on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the arrow under Crop, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1. Click Crop to finish cropping the image.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Repeat these steps for the other pictures that you want to change.
In the Position box, enter 0%.
To change the color for the duplicate pictures (second, third, and fourth from the top), do the following:
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click the arrow next to Recolor, and then do the following:
Select the picture that you would like to recolor.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
For the third picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left).
For the second picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 6 Light (seventh option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1 pt.
For the fourth picture from the top, under Light Variations, click Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:
Under Glow Variations, select any option in the first row (5 pt glow options).
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left).
On the slide, right-click the rectangle and then click Edit Text.
Enter text in the text box and select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list and then select 24 from the Font Size list.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, click More Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green: 127, and Blue: 127.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left within the rectangle.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
On the slide, select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the bottom-right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shapes dialog box launcher. In the Format Shapes dialog box, click Text Box in the left pane. In the right pane, under Internal margin, enter 1” in the Left box to increase the left margin in the rectangle to accommodate the embossed picture.
To reproduce the olive-green embossed picture for the top rectangle on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height and width are set to .75”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the down arrow under Crop, and then click Crop to Shape. Under Rectangles, click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line.
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Picture Color in the left pane, under Recolor, click the button next to Presets, and then under Light Variations click Olive Green, Accent color 3 Light (third row, fourth option from the left).
Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:
Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).